blob: d22f5c63dee1b0661e3948378ad3de527ac108b4 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000177static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 if (SI1 == SI2)
179 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000181 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
182 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
183 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
184 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
185 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000186 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000187
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000188 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
189 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
190 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000191 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
192 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
193 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
194 return false;
195 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000196
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000197 return true;
198}
199
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000200/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
201/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
202/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000203static bool
204isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
205 Instruction *Cond,
206 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
207 if (SI1 == SI2)
208 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000209 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
210
211 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000212 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000213 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
214 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
215 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
216 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000217 if (!Ci2)
218 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
220 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
221 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
222 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
223 return false;
224
225 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
226 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000227 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000228 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
229 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
230 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000231 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
232 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000233 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000234 return false;
235 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
236 }
237 return true;
238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
241/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
242/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
243/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000244static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
245 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000246 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
247 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000248
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000249 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000250 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000251 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000252}
253
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000254/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
255/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
256/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000257/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000258static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000259 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000260 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000261 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000262 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000263}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000264
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000265/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
266/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000267/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
268/// which works well enough for us.
269///
270/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000271/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
272/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
273/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
274/// set and true is returned.
275///
276/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
277/// Select whose cost is 2.
278///
279/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
280/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
281/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000282static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000283 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000284 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000285 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
286 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000287 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
288 // so limit the recursion depth.
289 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
290 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
291 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
292 return false;
293
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000294 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000295 if (!I) {
296 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
297 // can be executed unconditionally.
298 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
299 if (C->canTrap())
300 return false;
301 return true;
302 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000303 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000304
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000305 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000306 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000307 if (PBB == BB)
308 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000309
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000310 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
311 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000312 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
313 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000314 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000315 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000316
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
318 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000319 if (!AggressiveInsts)
320 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000321
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000322 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
324 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000325
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000326 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
327 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
328 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000329 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000330 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000331
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000332 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000333
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000334 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
335 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
336 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
337 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
338 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
339 // enabled further IR optimizations.
340 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
341 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000342 return false;
343
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000344 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
345 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000346
347 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
348 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000349 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
351 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 return false;
353 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
354 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000355 return true;
356}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000357
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000358/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000359/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000360static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000361 // Normal constant int.
362 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000363 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000364 return CI;
365
366 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
367 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000368 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000369
370 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
371 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
372 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
373
374 // IntToPtr const int.
375 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
376 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
377 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
378 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
379 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
380 return CI;
381 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000382 return cast<ConstantInt>(
383 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000384 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000385 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000386}
387
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000388namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000389
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000390/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
391/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
392/// structure.
393/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
394/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
395/// representing the different cases for the switch.
396/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
397/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
398/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
399/// fail.
400struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000401 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
403 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
404 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
405 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
409 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
410 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000411 }
412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000415 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000416 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000418private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
420 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
421 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
423 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424 CompValue = NewVal;
425 return (CompValue != nullptr);
426 }
427
428 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
429 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
430 /// match depending on isEQ).
431 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
432 /// against is placed in CompValue.
433 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
434 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000435 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
437 ICmpInst *ICI;
438 ConstantInt *C;
439 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000440 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000441 return false;
442 }
443
444 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000445 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000446
447 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000448 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000450 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000451
452 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
453 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
454
455 /*
456 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
457 x : BITVECTOR(64);
458 y : BITVECTOR(64);
459 z : BITVECTOR(64);
460 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
461 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
462 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
463 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000464 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
465 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
466 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000467 */
468
469 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
470 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
471 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
472 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
473 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
474 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
475 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
476
477 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
478 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
479 //
480 // mask = (1 << z)
481 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
482 //
483 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
484 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
485
486 // Pattern match a special case:
487 /*
488 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
489 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
490 );
491 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000493 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
494 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000495 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000497 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 return false;
499
500 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000501 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000502 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
503 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000504 UsedICmps++;
505 return true;
506 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000507 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000508
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 // Pattern match a special case:
510 /*
511 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
512 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
513 );
514 */
515 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
516 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
517 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
518 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
519 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
520 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
521 return false;
522
523 Vals.push_back(C);
524 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
525 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
526 UsedICmps++;
527 return true;
528 }
529 }
530
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000531 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000532 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000533 return false;
534
535 UsedICmps++;
536 Vals.push_back(C);
537 return ICI->getOperand(0);
538 }
539
540 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000541 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
542 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543
544 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
545 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
546 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000547 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
548 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
550 }
551
552 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
553 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
554 // x != 0 && x != 1.
555 if (!isEQ)
556 Span = Span.inverse();
557
558 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
559 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
560 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000561 }
562
563 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000564 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000565 return false;
566
567 // Add all values from the range to the set
568 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000570
571 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000572 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000573 }
574
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000575 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
577 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
578 /// vector.
579 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000580 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000581 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
582 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000583
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000584 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
585 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000586 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000587
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000589 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000591
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000592 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000593 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000594
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000595 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
596 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
597 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000598 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
599 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
600 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
601 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000602 continue;
603 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000604
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000606 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000607 // Match succeed, continue the loop
608 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000609 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000610
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
612 // comparison against the same value as the others.
613 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
614 if (!Extra) {
615 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000616 continue;
617 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000618 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
619 CompValue = nullptr;
620 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000621 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000622 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000623};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000624}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000625
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000626static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000627 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000628 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
629 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
630 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
631 if (BI->isConditional())
632 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000633 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
634 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000635 }
636
637 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000638 if (Cond)
639 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000640}
641
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000642/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000643/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000644Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000645 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000646 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
647 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
648 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000649 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
650 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
651 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000652 CV = SI->getCondition();
653 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000654 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000655 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000656 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000657 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000658 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000659
660 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000661 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000662 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
663 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000664 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000665 CV = Ptr;
666 }
667 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000668 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000669}
670
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000671/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000672/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000673BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
674 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000675 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000676 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000677 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
678 ++i)
679 Cases.push_back(
680 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000681 return SI->getDefaultDest();
682 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000683
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000684 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000685 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000686 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000687 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
688 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000689 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690}
691
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000692/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000693/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000694static void
695EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
696 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000697 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000698}
699
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000700/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000701static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
702 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000703 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
704
705 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
706 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
707 std::swap(V1, V2);
708
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000709 if (V1->size() == 0)
710 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000711 if (V1->size() == 1) {
712 // Just scan V2.
713 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
714 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
715 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
716 return true;
717 }
718
719 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
720 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
721 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
722 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
723 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
724 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
725 return true;
726 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
727 ++i1;
728 else
729 ++i2;
730 }
731 return false;
732}
733
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000734/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
735/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
736/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
737/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
738/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
740 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000741 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000742 if (!PredVal)
743 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000744
745 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
746 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000747 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
748 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000749
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000750 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
751 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
752
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000753 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000754 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000755 BasicBlock *PredDef =
756 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
757 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000758
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000759 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000761 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000762 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000763
764 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
765 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
766 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
767 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
768 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
769 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000770 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000771 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000772
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000773 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
774 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
775 // uncond br.
776 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
777 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000778 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000779 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000780
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000781 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000782 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000783
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000785 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
786 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000787
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000788 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
789 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000790 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000791
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000792 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
793 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000794 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000795 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
796 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000798 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000799 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000800
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000801 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
802 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000803 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000804 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
805 if (HasWeight)
806 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
807 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000808 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000809 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
810 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000811 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
812 --i;
813 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000814 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000815 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000816 Weights.pop_back();
817 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000818 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
819 SI->removeCase(i);
820 }
821 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000822 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000823 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000824 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
825 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000826
827 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000828 return true;
829 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000830
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000831 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
832 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000833 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000835 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
836 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000837 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000838 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000839 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
840 }
841 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000842
843 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
844 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000845 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
847 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
848 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
849 break;
850 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851
852 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000853 if (!TheRealDest)
854 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000855
856 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
857 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000858 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
859 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
860 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000862 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000863
864 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000865 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000866 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867
868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000869 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
870 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000871
872 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
873 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000874}
875
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000876namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000877/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
878/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
879/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
880struct ConstantIntOrdering {
881 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
882 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
883 }
884};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000885}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000886
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000887static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
888 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
889 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
890 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000891 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000892 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000893 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000894}
895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000896static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000897 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000898 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000899 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000900 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
901
902 return false;
903}
904
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000905/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
906/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
907/// metadata.
908static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
909 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000910 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 assert(MD);
912 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000913 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000914 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000915 }
916
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000917 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
918 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
919 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000920 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000921 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
922 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
923 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
924 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000925 }
926}
927
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000928/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000929static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000930 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
931 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
932 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
933 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
934 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000935 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000936}
937
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000938/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
939/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000940/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
941/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000942bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
943 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000944 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000945 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000946 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
947 bool Changed = false;
948
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000949 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000951 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000952
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000953 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
954 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000955 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956
957 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
958 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000959 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000960 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
961
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000962 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000963 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
964
965 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
966 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
967 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000968 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000969
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000970 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
971 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000972 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
973 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
974
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000975 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000976 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000977 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000978 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
979 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
980 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000981 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
982 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
983 // successor's weights
984 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000986 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000987 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000988 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000989 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000990 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
991 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
992 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000993 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000994
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000995 if (PredDefault == BB) {
996 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
997 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000998 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000999 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1000 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1001 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1002 else {
1003 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1004 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001005
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001006 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1007 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001008 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1009 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001010 Weights.pop_back();
1011 }
1012
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001013 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001014 --i;
1015 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001016 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001017
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001018 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1020 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1021 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1022 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1023 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001024
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001025 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1026 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001027 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1028 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1029 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1030 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1031 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001032 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1033 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1034 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1035 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001036 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1037 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001038 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001039 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001041 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1042 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1043 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1044 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1045 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1046 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1047 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1048 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001049 } else {
1050 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1051 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1052 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001053 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1054 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001055 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1056 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1057 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001058
1059 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001060 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1061 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001062 Weights.pop_back();
1063 }
1064
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001065 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1066 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001067 --i;
1068 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001069 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001070
1071 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1072 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1075 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001076 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1077 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001078 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1079 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001080 PTIHandled.erase(
1081 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001082 }
1083
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001084 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1085 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001086 for (std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator
1087 I = PTIHandled.begin(),
1088 E = PTIHandled.end();
1089 I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001090 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1091 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001092 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001093 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001094 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001095 }
1096
1097 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1098 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1099 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001100 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1101 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001102
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001103 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001104 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001105 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001106 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001107 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001108 }
1109
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001110 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001111 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1112 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001113 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001114 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1115 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001116
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001117 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1118 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1119 FitWeights(Weights);
1120
1121 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001123 NewSI->setMetadata(
1124 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1125 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001126 }
1127
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001128 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001129
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001130 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1131 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1132 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001133 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001134 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1135 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001136 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001137 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001138 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001139 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1140 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001141 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001142 }
1143 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1144 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001145
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001146 Changed = true;
1147 }
1148 }
1149 return Changed;
1150}
1151
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001152// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1153// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1154// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001155static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1156 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001157 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001158 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001159 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001160 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1161 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1162 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001163 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001164 return false;
1165 }
1166 }
1167 }
1168 return true;
1169}
1170
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001171static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1172
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001173/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1174/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1175/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001176static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001177 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001178 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1179 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1180 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1181 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1182 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001183 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1184 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001185
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001186 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1187 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1188
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001189 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001190 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1191 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1192 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1193 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1194 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001195 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001196 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001197 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001198 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001199 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001200 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001201 return false;
1202
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001203 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001204
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001205 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001206 do {
1207 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1208 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1209 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1210 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001211
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001212 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1213 return Changed;
1214
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001215 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1216 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1217 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001218 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001219 if (!I2->use_empty())
1220 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001221 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001222 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1223 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1224 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1225 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1226 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1227 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1228 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1229 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1230 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1231 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001232 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001233 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001234 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001235
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001236 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1237 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001238 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1239 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1240 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1241 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1242 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001243 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001244 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001245 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001246 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001247 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248
1249 return true;
1250
1251HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001252 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1253 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001254 return Changed;
1255
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001256 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001257 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001258 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001259 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1260 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1261 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1262 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1263 continue;
1264
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001265 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1266 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1267 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1268 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001269 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001270
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001271 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001272 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001273 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001274 return Changed;
1275 }
1276 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001277
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001278 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001279 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001280 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001281 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001282 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1283 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001284 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001285 }
1286
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001287 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001288 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1289 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1290 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1291 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001292 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001293 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001294 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001295 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001296 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001297 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1298 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001299 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1300 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001301
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001302 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1303 // that determines the right value.
1304 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001305 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001306 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1307 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1308 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001309
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001310 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1311 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1312 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1313 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001314 }
1315 }
1316
1317 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001318 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1319 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001320
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001321 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001322 return true;
1323}
1324
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001325/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001326/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1327/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1328/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1329static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1330 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1331 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1332 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1333
1334 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1335 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001336 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1337 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1338 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001339 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001340 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1341 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1342 return false;
1343 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001344 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1345 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1346 return false;
1347
1348 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001349 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001350 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001351 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001352 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1353 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001354 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001355 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001356 } else {
1357 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1358 break;
1359 }
1360 }
1361 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1362 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001363
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001364 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1365 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1366 // instructions in an identical order.
1367 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001368 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1369 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1370 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001371 // Skip debug info.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001372 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1))
1373 ++RI1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001374 if (RI1 == RE1)
1375 return false;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001376 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2))
1377 ++RI2;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001378 if (RI2 == RE2)
1379 return false;
1380 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1381 ++RI1;
1382 ++RI2;
1383
1384 bool Changed = false;
1385 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1386 // Skip debug info.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001387 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1))
1388 ++RI1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001389 if (RI1 == RE1)
1390 return Changed;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001391 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2))
1392 ++RI2;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001393 if (RI2 == RE2)
1394 return Changed;
1395
1396 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001397 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001398 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1399 // perform the same operation.
1400 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001401 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) ||
1402 isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) || I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001403 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1404 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1405 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001406 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() || !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001407 return Changed;
1408
1409 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001410 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001411 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1412 bool SwapOpnds = false;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001413 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 && ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001414 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1415 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1416 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1417 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1418 SwapOpnds = true;
1419 }
1420 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1421 if (SwapOpnds)
1422 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1423 return Changed;
1424 }
1425
1426 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1427 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1428 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001429 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001430 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001431 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1432 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1433 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001434 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1435 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001436 if (Op1Idx != ~0U || isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001437 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1438 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1439 if (SwapOpnds)
1440 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1441 return Changed;
1442 }
1443 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1444 Op1Idx = I;
1445 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1446 }
1447
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001448 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1449 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1450
1451 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1452 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1453 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1454 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1455 if (!NewPN) {
1456 NewPN =
1457 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001458 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001459 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1460 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1461 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1462 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001463 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1464 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001465 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001466 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1467 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001468
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001469 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1470 // instruction in the basic block down.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00001471 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == &BB1->front()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == &BB2->front());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001472 // Sink the instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001473 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd->getIterator(),
1474 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001475 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1476 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1477 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1478
1479 if (!I2->use_empty())
1480 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1481 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001482 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1483 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001484 I2->eraseFromParent();
1485
1486 if (UpdateRE1)
1487 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1488 if (UpdateRE2)
1489 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001490 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001491 NumSinkCommons++;
1492 Changed = true;
1493 }
1494 return Changed;
1495}
1496
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001497/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1498/// conditional block.
1499///
1500/// We are looking for code like the following:
1501/// BrBB:
1502/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1503/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1504/// ... // function).
1505/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1506/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1507/// ThenBB:
1508/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1509/// br label EndBB
1510/// EndBB:
1511/// ...
1512/// We are going to transform this into:
1513/// BrBB:
1514/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1515/// ... //
1516/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1517/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1518/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1519/// ...
1520///
1521/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1522/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001523static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1524 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001525 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1526 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001527 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001528
1529 // Volatile or atomic.
1530 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001531 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001532
1533 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1534
1535 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001536 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001537 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1538 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1539 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001540 // Skip debug info.
1541 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1542 continue;
1543 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001544
1545 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001546 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001547 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001548
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001549 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1550 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1551 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1552 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1553 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001554 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001555 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001556 }
1557
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001558 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001559}
1560
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001561/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001562///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001563/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1564/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1565/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1566/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1567/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1568///
1569/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1570/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1571/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1572/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1573///
1574///
1575/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1576/// \code
1577/// BB:
1578/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1579/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1580/// ThenBB:
1581/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001582/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001583/// EndBB:
1584/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1585/// ...
1586/// \endcode
1587///
1588/// Into this IR:
1589/// \code
1590/// BB:
1591/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1592/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1593/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1594/// ...
1595/// \endcode
1596///
1597/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001598static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001599 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001600 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1601 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1602 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1603 return false;
1604
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001605 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1606 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1607
1608 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1609 // to swap the select operands later.
1610 bool Invert = false;
1611 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1612 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1613 Invert = true;
1614 }
1615 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1616
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001617 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1618 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1619 // - They are defined in BB, and
1620 // - They have no side effects, and
1621 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1622 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1623
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001624 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001625 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1626 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001627 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001628 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001629 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001630 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001631 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001632 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1633 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001634
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001635 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001636 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001637 ++SpeculationCost;
1638 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001639 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001640
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001641 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001642 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1643 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1644 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001645 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001646 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001647 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1648 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001649 return false;
1650
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001651 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1652 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1653 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1654
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001655 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001656 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001657 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001658 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001659 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001660 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001661 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1662
1663 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001664 }
1665 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001666
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001667 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1668 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1669 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001670 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1671 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1672 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001673 I != E; ++I)
1674 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001675 ++SpeculationCost;
1676 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001677 return false;
1678 }
1679
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001680 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1681 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001682 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001683 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001684 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1685 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001686
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001687 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001688 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001689 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001690 continue;
1691
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001692 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1693 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1694 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1695 return false;
1696
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001697 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001698 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1699 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1700 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001701 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1702
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001703 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1704 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001705 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001706 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1707 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001708 unsigned MaxCost =
1709 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001710 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001711 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001712
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001713 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1714 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1715 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001716 // constant expression.
1717 ++SpeculationCost;
1718 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001719 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001720 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001721
1722 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1723 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001724 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001725 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001726
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001727 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001728 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001729
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001730 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1731 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001732 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001733 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1734 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1735 if (Invert)
1736 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001737 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1738 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001739 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1740 }
1741
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001742 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1743 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001744 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001745 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1746
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001747 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001748 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1749 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001750
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001751 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001752 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001753 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1754 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1755 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1756 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1757 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1758 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1759
1760 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1761 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1762 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001763
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001764 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001765 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1766 // destinations were inverted.
1767 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001768 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001769 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001770 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1771 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001772 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1773 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001774 }
1775
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001776 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001777 return true;
1778}
1779
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001780/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001781static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1782 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001783 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001784
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001785 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001786 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1787 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001788 if (Size > 10)
1789 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001790 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001791
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001792 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001793 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001794 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1795 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001796 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
1797 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001798 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001799
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001800 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1801 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001802
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001803 return true;
1804}
1805
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001806/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1807/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1808/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001809static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001810 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1811 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001812 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1813 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001814 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1815 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001816
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001817 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1818 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001819 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001820 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001821 }
1822
1823 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001824 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
1825 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001826
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001827 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
1828 if (llvm::any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
1829 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1830 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1831 }))
1832 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001833
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001834 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1835 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001836 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001837 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001838 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
1839 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001840
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001841 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1842 // branch to RealDest.
1843 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1844 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001845
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001846 if (RealDest == BB)
1847 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001848 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001849 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
1850 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001851
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001852 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1853 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1854 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1855 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001856 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
1857 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
1858 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001859 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001860
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001861 // Update PHI nodes.
1862 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001863
1864 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1865 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1866 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1867 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001868 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001869 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1870 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1871 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1872 continue;
1873 }
1874 // Clone the instruction.
1875 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001876 if (BBI->hasName())
1877 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001878
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001879 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001880 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
1881 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001882 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1883 *i = PI->second;
1884 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001885
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001886 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001887 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001888 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1889 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
1890 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
1891 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
1892 N = nullptr;
1893 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001894 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001895 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001896 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001897 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001898 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1899 if (N)
1900 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001901 }
1902
1903 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1904 // to EdgeBB instead.
1905 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1906 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1907 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1908 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1909 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1910 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001911
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001912 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001913 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001914 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001915
1916 return false;
1917}
1918
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001919/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1920/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001921static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1922 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001923 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1924 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1925 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1926 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1927 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1928 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001929 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1930 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1931 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001932 if (!IfCond ||
1933 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1934 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1935 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001936
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001937 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1938 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1939 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1940 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1941 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1942 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1943 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1944 if (NumPhis > 2)
1945 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001946
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001947 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1948 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1949 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001950 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001951 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1952 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001953 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1954 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001955
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001956 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1957 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001958 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001959 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001960 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001961 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001962 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001963
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001964 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001965 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001966 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001967 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001968 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001969 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001970
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001971 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001972 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1973 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001974 if (!PN)
1975 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001976
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001977 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1978 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1979 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1980 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1981 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1982 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1983 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001984
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00001985 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
1986 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
1987 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
1988 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001989 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001990 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1991 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1992 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001993 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001994 } else {
1995 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001996 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
1997 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001998 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001999 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002000 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2001 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002002 return false;
2003 }
2004 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002005
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002006 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002007 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002008 } else {
2009 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002010 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2011 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002012 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002013 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002014 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2015 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002016 return false;
2017 }
2018 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002019
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002020 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002021 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002022
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002023 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2024 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002025 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002026 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002027
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002028 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2029 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002030 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002031 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002032 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002033 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002034 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002035 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002036 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002037 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002038
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002039 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2040 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002041 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002042 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002043
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002044 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2045 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2046 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002047 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002048 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002049
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002050 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2051 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2052 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2053 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002054 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2055 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002056 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002057 return true;
2058}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002059
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002060/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2061/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002062/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002063static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002064 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002065 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2066 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2067 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2068 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2069 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002070
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002071 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2072 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2073 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002074 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002075 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002076 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002077 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002078
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002079 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002080 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2081 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2082 // branch into a return.
2083 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2084 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2085 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002086 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002087 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002088 return true;
2089 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002090
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002091 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2092 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2093 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2094 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002095
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002096 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2097 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2098 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2099 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2100 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2101 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2102 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002103
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002104 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2105 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2106 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2107 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2108 // safe.
2109 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2110 if (TCV->canTrap())
2111 return false;
2112 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2113 if (FCV->canTrap())
2114 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002115
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002116 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2117 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2118 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2119 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002120
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002121 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2122 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002123 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002124 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002125 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2126 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2127 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2128 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002129 TrueValue =
2130 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002131 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002132 }
2133
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002134 Value *RI =
2135 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002136
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002137 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002138
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002139 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002140 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002141 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002142
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002143 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2144
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002145 return true;
2146}
2147
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002148/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002149/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002150static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002151 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2152 return false;
2153 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2154 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2155 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2156 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2157 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2158 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2159 return true;
2160 }
2161 }
2162 return false;
2163}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002164
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002165/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2166/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2167/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2168static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2169 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2170 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2171 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2172 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2173 bool PredHasWeights =
2174 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2175 bool SuccHasWeights =
2176 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2177 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2178 if (!PredHasWeights)
2179 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2180 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2181 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2182 return true;
2183 } else {
2184 return false;
2185 }
2186}
2187
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002188/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2189/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2190/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002191bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002192 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002193
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002194 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002195 if (BI->isConditional())
2196 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2197 else {
2198 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2199 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2200 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2201 // predecessor.
2202 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2203 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2204 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2205 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2206 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002207 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002208 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002209 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2210 Cond = Curr;
2211 break;
2212 }
2213 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2214 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2215 return false;
2216 }
2217 }
2218
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002219 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002220 return false;
2221 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002222
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002223 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2224 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002225 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002226
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002227 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002228 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002229
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002230 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002231 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2232 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002233
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002234 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002235 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002236
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002237 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2238 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2239 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2240 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2241 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2242 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002243 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002244 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2245 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2246 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002247 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002248 return false;
2249 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2250 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2251 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2252 return false;
2253 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2254 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2255 // and Cond.
2256 ++NumBonusInsts;
2257 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2258 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2259 return false;
2260 }
2261
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002262 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2263 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2264 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2265 if (CE->canTrap())
2266 return false;
2267 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2268 if (CE->canTrap())
2269 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002270
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002271 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002272 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002273 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002274 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2275 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002276
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002277 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2278 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002279 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002280
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002281 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2282 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2283 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002284 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002285 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002286 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002287 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2288 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002289 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002290
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002291 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002292 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002293 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002294
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002295 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002296 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002297 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002298 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002299 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002300 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2301 Opc = Instruction::And;
2302 InvertPredCond = true;
2303 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2304 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2305 InvertPredCond = true;
2306 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002307 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002308 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002309 } else {
2310 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2311 continue;
2312 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002313
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002314 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002315 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002316
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002317 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2318 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002319 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002320
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002321 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2322 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2323 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2324 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002325 NewCond =
2326 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002327 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002328
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002329 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002330 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002331 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002332
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002333 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002334 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002335 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2336 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2337 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002338 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002339 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002340 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002341 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2342 continue;
2343 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2344 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002345 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002346 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002347
2348 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2349 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2350 // only given the branch precondition.
2351 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2352 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002353 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002354
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002355 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2356 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002357 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002358 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002359
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002360 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2361 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002362 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002363 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002364 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002365 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002366 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002367 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002368
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002369 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002370 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2371 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002372 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2373
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002374 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002375 bool HasWeights =
2376 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2377 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002378 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2379
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002380 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002381 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002382 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2383 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002384 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002385 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002386 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002387 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2388 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2389 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002390 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2391 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2392 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002393 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002394 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2395 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2396 }
2397 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002398 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002399 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2400 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002401 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002402 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002403 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2404 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2405 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2406 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002407 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2408 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002409 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2410 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2411 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002412 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2413 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2414 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2415
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002416 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2417 NewWeights.end());
2418 PBI->setMetadata(
2419 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2420 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002421 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002422 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002423 } else {
2424 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2425 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002426 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002427 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002428 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002429 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002430 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2431 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2432 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2433 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002434 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2435 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2436 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2437 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002438 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002439 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2440 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002441 } else {
2442 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2443 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2444 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002445 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2446 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002447 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002448 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2449 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2450 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2451 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002452 }
2453 }
2454 // Update PHI Node.
2455 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2456 MergedCond);
2457 }
2458 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2459 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2460 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2461 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002462 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002463
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002464 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2465 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2466
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002467 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2468 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2469 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2470 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002471
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002472 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002473 }
2474 return false;
2475}
2476
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002477// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2478// nullptr.
2479static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2480 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2481 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2482 if (!BB)
2483 continue;
2484 for (auto &I : *BB)
2485 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2486 if (S)
2487 // Multiple stores seen.
2488 return nullptr;
2489 else
2490 S = SI;
2491 }
2492 }
2493 return S;
2494}
2495
2496static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2497 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2498 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2499 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2500 //
2501 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2502 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2503 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2504 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2505 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2506 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2507 // one.
2508 //
2509 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2510 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2511 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2512 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2513 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002514
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002515 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2516 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2517 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2518 if (!AlternativeV)
2519 break;
2520
2521 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2522 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2523 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2524 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2525 break;
2526 PHI = nullptr;
2527 }
2528 if (PHI)
2529 return PHI;
2530
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002531 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2532 if (!AlternativeV &&
2533 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2534 return V;
2535
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002536 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002537 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2538 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2539 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002540 PHI->addIncoming(
2541 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002542 return PHI;
2543}
2544
2545static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2546 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2547 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2548 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2549 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2550 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2551 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2552 };
2553
2554 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2555 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2556 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2557 if (!BB)
2558 return true;
2559 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2560 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2561 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002562 unsigned N = 0;
2563 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2564 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2565 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2566 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2567 ++N;
2568 // Free instructions.
2569 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2570 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2571 continue;
2572 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002573 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002574 }
2575 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002576 };
2577
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002578 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2579 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2580 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002581 return false;
2582
2583 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2584 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2585 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2586 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2587 // testing.
2588 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2589 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2590 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2591 return false;
2592
2593 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2594 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2595 return false;
2596
2597 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2598 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2599 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2600 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2601 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2602 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2603 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2604 //
2605 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2606 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2607 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2608 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2609 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2610 return false;
2611 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2612 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2613 return false;
2614 if (QTB)
2615 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2616 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2617 return false;
2618 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2619 I != E; ++I)
2620 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2621 return false;
2622
2623 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2624 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2625 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2626 ->getCondition();
2627 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2628 ->getCondition();
2629
2630 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2631 PStore->getParent());
2632 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2633 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2634
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002635 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2636
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002637 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2638 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2639
2640 if (InvertPCond)
2641 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2642 if (InvertQCond)
2643 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2644 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2645
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002646 auto *T =
2647 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002648 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2649 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2650 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2651 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2652 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2653 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2654
2655 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2656 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002657
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002658 return true;
2659}
2660
2661static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2662 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2663 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2664 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2665 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2666 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2667 // PBI and QBI.
2668 //
2669 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2670 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2671 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2672 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2673 //
2674 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2675 //
2676 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2677 // / \ | \
2678 // PTB PFB | PFB
2679 // \ / | /
2680 // QBI QBI
2681 // / \ | \
2682 // QTB QFB | QFB
2683 // \ / | /
2684 // PostBB PostBB
2685 //
2686 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2687 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2688 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002689 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002690 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2691 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2692 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2693 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2694 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2695
2696 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2697 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2698 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2699 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2700 InvertPCond = true;
2701 }
2702 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2703 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2704 InvertQCond = true;
2705 }
2706
2707 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2708 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2709 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2710 PTB = nullptr;
2711 if (QTB == PostBB)
2712 QTB = nullptr;
2713
2714 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2715 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2716 // predecessor.
2717 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002718 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002719 };
2720 if (!PostBB ||
2721 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2722 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2723 return false;
2724 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2725 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2726 return false;
2727 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2728 return false;
2729
2730 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2731 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002732 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002733 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2734 if (!BB)
2735 continue;
2736 for (auto &I : *BB)
2737 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2738 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2739 }
2740 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2741 if (!BB)
2742 continue;
2743 for (auto &I : *BB)
2744 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2745 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2746 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002747
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002748 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2749 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2750 // clear what it contains.
2751 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2752
2753 bool Changed = false;
2754 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2755 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2756 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2757 return Changed;
2758}
2759
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002760/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2761/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002762/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2763/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002764static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2765 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002766 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2767 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002768
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002769 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002770 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002771 // this conditional branch redundant.
2772 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2773 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2774 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2775 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2776 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2777 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2778 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002779 BI->setCondition(
2780 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
2781 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002782 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002783
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002784 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2785 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2786 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2787 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002788 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002789 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2790 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2791 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002792 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2793 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2794 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002795 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002796 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002797 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
2798 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002799 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2800 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002801 NewPN->addIncoming(
2802 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
2803 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002804 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002805 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002806 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002807 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002808
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002809 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002810 return true;
2811 }
2812 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002813
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002814 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2815 if (CE->canTrap())
2816 return false;
2817
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002818 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2819 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2820 // merged store at the end.
2821 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2822 return true;
2823
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002824 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002825 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002826 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002827 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2828 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2829 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2830 ++BBI;
2831 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002832 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002833
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002834 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002835 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2836 PBIOp = 0;
2837 BIOp = 0;
2838 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2839 PBIOp = 0;
2840 BIOp = 1;
2841 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2842 PBIOp = 1;
2843 BIOp = 0;
2844 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2845 PBIOp = 1;
2846 BIOp = 1;
2847 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002848 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002849 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002850
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002851 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2852 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2853 // keep getting unwound.
2854 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2855 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002856
2857 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002858 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2859 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002860
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002861 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2862 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2863 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2864
2865 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002866 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002867 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
2868 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002869 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2870 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002871
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002872 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2873 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2874 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2875 if (CE->canTrap())
2876 return false;
2877
2878 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2879 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2880 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2881 if (CE->canTrap())
2882 return false;
2883 }
2884
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002885 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002886 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002887
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002888 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002889 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002890
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002891 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2892 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2893 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2894 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2895 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2896 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2897 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2898 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2899 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2900 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002901 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
2902 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002903 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2904 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002905 }
2906
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002907 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002908
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002909 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2910 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002911
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002912 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2913 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002914 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002915 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002916 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002917
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002918 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2919 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002920 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002921
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002922 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002923 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002924
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002925 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2926 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2927 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2928 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002929
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002930 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2931 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002932 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002933 bool HasWeights =
2934 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2935 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002936 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00002937 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2938 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2939 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2940 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002941 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2942 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2943 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002944 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2945 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2946 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00002947 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002948 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2949
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002950 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00002951 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2952 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002953 }
2954
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002955 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2956 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002957 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002958
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002959 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2960 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2961 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2962 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002963 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002964 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2965 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2966 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2967 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2968 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2969 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2970 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002971 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
2972 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002973 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00002974 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
2975 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
2976 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
2977 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002978 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00002979 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2980 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2981 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2982 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2983 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
2984 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
2985 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
2986 PredOther * SuccCommon};
2987
2988 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2989
2990 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2991 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2992 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
2993 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002994 }
2995 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002996
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002997 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2998 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002999
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003000 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3001 // one fewer predecessor.
3002 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003003}
3004
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003005// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3006// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003007// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3008// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3009// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3010static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003011 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3012 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003013 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003014 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3015 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3016 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3017 // successor.
3018 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003019 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003020
3021 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003022 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003023 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3024 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003025 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003026 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003027 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003028 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003029 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3030 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003031 }
3032
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003033 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3034 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3035
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003036 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003037 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003038 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3039 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3040 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003041 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003042 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003043 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3044 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003045 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3046 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3047 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003048 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3049 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003050 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003051 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3052 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3053 // terminator must be unreachable.
3054 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3055 } else {
3056 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3057 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3058 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003059 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003060 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003061 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003062 else
3063 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003064 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003065 }
3066
3067 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3068 return true;
3069}
3070
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003071// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003072// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3073// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3074// unconditional otherwise.
3075static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3076 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3077 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3078 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3079 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3080 return false;
3081
3082 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3083 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003084 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3085 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003086
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003087 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3088 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3089 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3090 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3091 if (HasWeights) {
3092 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3093 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003094 TrueWeight =
3095 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3096 FalseWeight =
3097 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003098 }
3099 }
3100
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003101 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003102 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3103 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003104}
3105
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003106// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003107// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3108// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3109// with
3110// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3111static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3112 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3113 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3114 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3115 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3116 return false;
3117
3118 // Extract the actual blocks.
3119 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3120 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3121
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003122 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003123 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3124 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003125}
3126
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003127/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3128/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003129/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3130/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3131/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3132/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3133/// like:
3134///
3135/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3136/// DEFAULT:
3137/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3138/// br label %end
3139/// end:
3140/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003141///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003142/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3143/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003144static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003145 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3146 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3147 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003148 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003149
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003150 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3151 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003152 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3153 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003154
3155 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3156 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003157
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003158 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3159 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3160 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3161 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003162 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3163 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003164
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003165 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3166 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3167 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003168
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003169 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3170 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3171 // away.
3172 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3173 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3174 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3175 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003176
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003177 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003178 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003179 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3180 }
3181 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003182 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003183 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003184
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003185 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3186 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3187 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003188 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003189 Value *V;
3190 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3191 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3192 else
3193 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003194
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003195 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3196 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3197 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003198 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003199 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003200
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003201 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3202 // the block.
3203 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003204 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003205 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003206 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3207 return false;
3208
3209 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3210 // true in the PHI.
3211 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003212 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003213
3214 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3215 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3216
3217 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3218 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3219 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3220 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3221
3222 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3223 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003224 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3225 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003226 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3227 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3228 if (HasWeights) {
3229 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3230 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3231 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003232 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003233 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3234
3235 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003236 SI->setMetadata(
3237 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3238 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003239 }
3240 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003241 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003242
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003243 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003244 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3245 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3246 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003247 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3248 return true;
3249}
3250
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003251/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003252/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3253/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003254static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3255 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003256 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003257 if (!Cond)
3258 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003259
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003260 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3261 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3262 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003263
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003264 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003265 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3266 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003267 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003268 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3269 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3270 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003271
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003272 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003273 if (!CompVal)
3274 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003275
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003276 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3277 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3278 return false;
3279
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003280 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3281
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003282 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3283 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3284 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3285 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003286
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003287 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003288 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003289 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3290 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003291
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003292 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3293 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3294
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003295 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3296 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003297 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3298 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3299 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003300
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003301 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003302
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003303 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003304 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3305 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003306
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003307 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3308 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3309 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3310 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003311 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3312 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003313 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3314 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003315 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3316
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003317 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003318 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003319 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003320 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003321
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003322 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003323
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003324 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3325 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003326 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003327
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003328 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003329 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003330 BB = NewBB;
3331 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003332
3333 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003334 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3335 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003336 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3337 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003338 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003339
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003340 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003341 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003342
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003343 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3344 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3345 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003346
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003347 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3348 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3349 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003350 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003351 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3352 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003353 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003354 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3355 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003356
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003357 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3358 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003359
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003360 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003361 return true;
3362}
3363
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003364bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003365 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3366 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3367 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3368 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3369 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3370 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003371
3372 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003373}
3374
3375// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3376bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3377 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3378
3379 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3380 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3381 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003382 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003383 while (++I != E)
3384 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3385 return false;
3386
3387 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3388 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3389
3390 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003391 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3392 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003393 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3394 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3395
3396 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3397 // it has other dependents.
3398 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3399 continue;
3400
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003401 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003402 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3403 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3404 continue;
3405
3406 bool isTrivial = true;
3407
3408 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3409 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3410 while (++I != E)
3411 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3412 isTrivial = false;
3413 break;
3414 }
3415
3416 if (isTrivial)
3417 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3418 }
3419
3420 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003421 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3422 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003423
3424 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3425 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3426 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3427 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3428 // to remove them all.
3429 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3430 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3431
3432 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3433 PI != PE;) {
3434 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3435 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3436 }
3437
3438 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3439 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3440 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3441 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3442 // predecessors.
3443 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3444 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3445 }
3446
3447 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3448 if (pred_empty(BB))
3449 BB->eraseFromParent();
3450
3451 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3452}
3453
3454// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3455bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003456 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3457 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003458 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3459 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003460
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003461 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3462 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003463 while (++I != E)
3464 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3465 return false;
3466
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003467 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003468 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3469 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3470 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003471 }
3472
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003473 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3474 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003475 if (LoopHeaders)
3476 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003477 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003478}
3479
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003480static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003481 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3482 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3483 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3484 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3485 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3486 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3487 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3488 // simplified.
3489 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003490 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3491 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003492 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3493 return false;
3494
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003495 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3496 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3497 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3498 return false;
3499
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003500 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003501 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003502 while (++I != E) {
3503 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3504 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003505 return false;
3506
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003507 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3508 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3509 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3510 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3511 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3512 break;
3513 default:
3514 return false;
3515 }
3516 }
3517
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003518 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3519 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003520 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003521 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003522
3523 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3524 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3525 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3526 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3527 // are both EH pads).
3528 if (UnwindDest) {
3529 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3530 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003531 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003532 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003533 I != IE; ++I) {
3534 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003535
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003536 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003537 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003538 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003539 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3540 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3541 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3542 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3543 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3544 // pad being removed.
3545 //
3546 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3547 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3548 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3549 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3550 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3551 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3552
3553 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3554 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3555
3556 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3557 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3558 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3559 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003560 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003561 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003562 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3563 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3564 }
3565 } else {
3566 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3567 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3568 // predecessors with this value.
3569 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3570 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3571 }
3572 }
3573 }
3574
3575 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003576 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003577 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3578 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003579 I != IE;) {
3580 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3581 // being moved to another block.
3582 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3583 if (PN->use_empty())
3584 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3585 // when we erase BB below.
3586 continue;
3587
3588 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3589 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3590 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3591 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3592 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3593 if (pred != BB)
3594 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3595 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3596 }
3597 }
3598
3599 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3600 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3601 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003602 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003603 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003604 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003605 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003606 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003607 }
3608 }
3609
3610 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3611 BB->eraseFromParent();
3612 return true;
3613}
3614
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003615// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3616static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3617 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3618 // with.
3619 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3620 if (!UnwindDest)
3621 return false;
3622
3623 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3624 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3625 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3626 return false;
3627
3628 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3629 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3630 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3631 return false;
3632
3633 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3634 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3635 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3636 // funclet bundle operands.
3637 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3638 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3639 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3640 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3641 // destination.
3642 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3643 RI->eraseFromParent();
3644
3645 return true;
3646}
3647
3648bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003649 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3650 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3651 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3652 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3653 return false;
3654
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003655 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003656 return true;
3657
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003658 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003659 return true;
3660
3661 return false;
3662}
3663
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003664bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003665 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003666 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3667 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003668
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003669 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003670 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3671 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003672 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3673 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003674 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3675 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3676 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3677 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3678 else
3679 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3680 }
3681 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003682
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003683 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003684 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003685 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3686 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3687 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003688 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003689 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003690 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003691
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003692 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003693 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003694 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3695 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003696 if (LoopHeaders)
3697 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003698 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003699
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003700 return true;
3701 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003702
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003703 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3704 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3705 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3706 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3707 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003708
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003709 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3710 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3711 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003712 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003713 return true;
3714 }
3715 return false;
3716}
3717
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003718bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3719 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003720
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003721 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003722
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003723 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3724 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003725 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3726 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003727 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003728 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3729 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3730 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003731 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3732 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003733
3734 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003735 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003736 if (SI->isVolatile())
3737 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003738 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003739 if (LI->isVolatile())
3740 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003741 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003742 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3743 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003744 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003745 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3746 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003747 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3748 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3749 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3750 // default.
3751 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3752 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3753 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3754 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003755 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3756 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003757 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003758 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003759 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3760 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3761 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3762 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003763 }
3764
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003765 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3766 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3767 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003768 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003769 Changed = true;
3770 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003771
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003772 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3773 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003774 if (&BB->front() != UI)
3775 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003776
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003777 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003778 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3779 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003780 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003781 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003782 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3783 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3784 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3785 TI->eraseFromParent();
3786 Changed = true;
3787 }
3788 } else {
3789 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003790 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003791 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3792 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003793 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003794 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3795 Changed = true;
3796 }
3797 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003798 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003799 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
3800 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003801 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003802 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3803 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003804 --i;
3805 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003806 Changed = true;
3807 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003808 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3809 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3810 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3811 Changed = true;
3812 }
3813 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3814 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3815 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3816 Changed = true;
3817 continue;
3818 }
3819
3820 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3821 E = CSI->handler_end();
3822 I != E; ++I) {
3823 if (*I == BB) {
3824 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3825 --I;
3826 --E;
3827 Changed = true;
3828 }
3829 }
3830 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3831 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3832 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3833 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3834 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3835 } else {
3836 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3837 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3838 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3839 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3840 }
3841 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3842 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3843 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3844 Changed = true;
3845 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003846 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003847 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3848 TI->eraseFromParent();
3849 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003850 }
3851 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003852
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003853 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003854 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003855 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3856 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003857 if (LoopHeaders)
3858 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003859 return true;
3860 }
3861
3862 return Changed;
3863}
3864
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003865static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3866 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3867
3868 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3869 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3870 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3871 return false;
3872 }
3873 return true;
3874}
3875
3876/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3877/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003878static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003879 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003880
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003881 bool HasDefault =
3882 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003883
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003884 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3885 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3886 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003887 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3888 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003889
3890 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3891 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003892 if (!DestA)
3893 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003894 if (Dest == DestA) {
3895 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3896 continue;
3897 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003898 if (!DestB)
3899 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003900 if (Dest == DestB) {
3901 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3902 continue;
3903 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003904 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003905 }
3906
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003907 assert(DestA && DestB &&
3908 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003909 assert(DestA != DestB);
3910 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3911 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3912 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3913
3914 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3915 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3916 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3917 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3918 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3919 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3920 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3921 OtherDest = DestB;
3922 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3923 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3924 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3925 OtherDest = DestA;
3926 } else
3927 return false;
3928
3929 // Start building the compare and branch.
3930
3931 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003932 Constant *NumCases =
3933 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003934
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003935 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3936 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003937 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3938
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003939 Value *Cmp;
3940 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003941 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003942 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3943 else
3944 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003945 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003946
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003947 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003948 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3949 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003950 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3951 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003952 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3953 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3954 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3955 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3956 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3957 else
3958 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3959 }
3960 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3961 TrueWeight /= 2;
3962 FalseWeight /= 2;
3963 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003964 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003965 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
3966 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
3967 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003968 }
3969 }
3970
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003971 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3972 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3973 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003974 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
3975 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003976 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003977 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3978 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003979 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3980 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003981 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
3982 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003983 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3984 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3985 }
3986
3987 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003988 SI->eraseFromParent();
3989
3990 return true;
3991}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003992
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003993/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003994/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003995static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3996 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003997 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003998 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003999 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004000 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004001
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004002 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4003 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4004 // bits are in the condition value.
4005 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
4006 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4007
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004008 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004009 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004010 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004011 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4012 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4013 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004014 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004015 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004016 }
4017 }
4018
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004019 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4020 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004021 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4022 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004023 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004024 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4025 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4026 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004027 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004028 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004029 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004030 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004031 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004032 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4033 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004034 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4035 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004036 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4037 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4038 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4039 return true;
4040 }
4041
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004042 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4043 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4044 if (HasWeight) {
4045 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4046 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4047 }
4048
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004049 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004050 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4051 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004052 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004053 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004054 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004055 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004056 Weights.pop_back();
4057 }
4058
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004059 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004060 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004061 SI->removeCase(Case);
4062 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004063 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004064 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4065 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004066 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4067 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004068 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004069
4070 return !DeadCases.empty();
4071}
4072
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004073/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4074/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004075/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4076/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4077/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4078static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004079 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004080 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004081 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004082 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004083 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004084
4085 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4086 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004087 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004088
4089 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4090
4091 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4092 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4093 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4094 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4095
4096 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004097 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4098 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004099
4100 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4101 return PHI;
4102 }
4103
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004104 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004105}
4106
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004107/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4108/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4109/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004110/// Returns true if a change is made.
4111static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004112 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004113 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4114
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004115 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4116 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004117 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4118 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004119
4120 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004121 PHINode *PHI =
4122 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4123 if (!PHI)
4124 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004125
4126 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4127 }
4128
4129 bool Changed = false;
4130
4131 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004132 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4133 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004134 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004135 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004136
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004137 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4138 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004139
4140 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4141 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4142 Changed = true;
4143 }
4144
4145 return Changed;
4146}
4147
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004148/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004149/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00004150static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004151 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4152 return false;
4153 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4154 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004155
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004156 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4157 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4158
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004159 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4160 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4161 isa<UndefValue>(C);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004162}
4163
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004164/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004165/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004166static Constant *
4167LookupConstant(Value *V,
4168 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004169 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4170 return C;
4171 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4172}
4173
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004174/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004175/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4176/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004177/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004178static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004179ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4180 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004181 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004182 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4183 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004184 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004185 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4186 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4187 if (A->isNullValue())
4188 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004189 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004190 }
4191
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004192 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4193 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4194 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4195 COps.push_back(A);
4196 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004197 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004198 }
4199
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004200 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004201 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4202 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004203 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004204
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004205 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004206}
4207
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004208/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004209/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004210/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004211/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004212static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004213GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004214 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004215 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4216 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004217 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4218 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4219
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004220 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4221 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004222 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004223 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4224 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4225 ++I) {
4226 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4227 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4228 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4229 return false;
4230 Pred = CaseDest;
4231 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4232 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4233 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4234 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004235 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004236 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004237
4238 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4239 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4240 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4241 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4242 User *User = Use.getUser();
4243 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4244 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4245 continue;
4246 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4247 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4248 continue;
4249 return false;
4250 }
4251
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004252 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004253 } else {
4254 break;
4255 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004256 }
4257
4258 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4259 if (!*CommonDest)
4260 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4261 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4262 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4263 return false;
4264
4265 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4266 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4267 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4268 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4269 if (Idx == -1)
4270 continue;
4271
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004272 Constant *ConstVal =
4273 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004274 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004275 return false;
4276
4277 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4278 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4279 return false;
4280
4281 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4282 }
4283
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004284 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004285}
4286
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004287// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4288// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004289static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004290 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4291 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004292 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4293 if (I.first == Result) {
4294 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4295 return;
4296 }
4297 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004298 UniqueResults.push_back(
4299 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004300}
4301
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004302// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004303// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4304// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4305// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004306static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4307 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4308 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4309 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4310 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004311 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4312 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4313
4314 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4315 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4316 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4317 DL))
4318 return false;
4319
4320 // Only one value per case is permitted
4321 if (Results.size() > 1)
4322 return false;
4323 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4324
4325 // Check the PHI consistency.
4326 if (!PHI)
4327 PHI = Results[0].first;
4328 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4329 return false;
4330 }
4331 // Find the default result value.
4332 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4333 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4334 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4335 DL);
4336 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4337 // is unreachable.
4338 DefaultResult =
4339 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4340 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004341 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004342 return false;
4343
4344 return true;
4345}
4346
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004347// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4348// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004349// Example:
4350// switch (a) {
4351// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4352// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4353// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4354// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4355// default:
4356// return 4;
4357// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004358static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4359 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4360 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004361 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004362 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004363 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4364 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4365 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4366 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4367 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4368 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4369
4370 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4371 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4372 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4373 Value *const ValueCompare =
4374 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4375 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4376 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4377 }
4378 Value *const ValueCompare =
4379 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004380 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4381 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004382 }
4383
4384 return nullptr;
4385}
4386
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004387// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4388// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004389static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4390 Value *SelectValue,
4391 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4392 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4393 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4394 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4395 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4396
4397 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4398
4399 // Remove the switch.
4400 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4401 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4402
4403 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4404 continue;
4405 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4406 }
4407 SI->eraseFromParent();
4408}
4409
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004410/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004411/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4412/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4413static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004414 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004415 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4416 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4417 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4418 Constant *DefaultResult;
4419 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4420 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004421 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4422 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004423 return false;
4424 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4425 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4426 return false;
4427 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4428
4429 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004430 Value *SelectValue =
4431 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004432 if (SelectValue) {
4433 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4434 return true;
4435 }
4436 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4437 return false;
4438}
4439
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004440namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004441/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4442class SwitchLookupTable {
4443public:
4444 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4445 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4446 SwitchLookupTable(
4447 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4448 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4449 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004450
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004451 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4452 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4453 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004454
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004455 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4456 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4457 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4458 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004459
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004460private:
4461 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4462 // different ways.
4463 enum {
4464 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4465 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4466 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004467
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004468 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4469 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4470 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4471 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004472
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004473 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4474 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4475 // shift and mask operations.
4476 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004477
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004478 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4479 // instructions from the table.
4480 ArrayKind
4481 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004482
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004483 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4484 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004485
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004486 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4487 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4488 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004489
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004490 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4491 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4492 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004493
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004494 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4495 GlobalVariable *Array;
4496};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004497}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004498
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004499SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4500 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4501 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4502 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004503 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004504 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004505 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4506 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004507
4508 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004509 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004510
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004511 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4512
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004513 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004514 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004515 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4516 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4517 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004518 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004519
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004520 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004521 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4522
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004523 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004524 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004525 }
4526
4527 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004528 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004529 assert(DefaultValue &&
4530 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004531 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004532 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4533 if (!TableContents[I])
4534 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004535 }
4536
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004537 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004538 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004539 }
4540
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004541 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4542 // that single value.
4543 if (SingleValue) {
4544 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4545 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004546 }
4547
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004548 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4549 // table index.
4550 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4551 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4552 APInt PrevVal;
4553 APInt DistToPrev;
4554 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4555 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4556 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4557 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4558 if (!ConstVal) {
4559 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4560 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4561 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4562 break;
4563 }
4564 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4565 if (I != 0) {
4566 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4567 if (I == 1) {
4568 DistToPrev = Dist;
4569 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4570 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4571 break;
4572 }
4573 }
4574 PrevVal = Val;
4575 }
4576 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4577 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4578 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4579 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4580 ++NumLinearMaps;
4581 return;
4582 }
4583 }
4584
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004585 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004586 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004587 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004588 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4589 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4590 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004591 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4592 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4593 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4594 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4595 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004596 }
4597 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4598 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4599 Kind = BitMapKind;
4600 ++NumBitMaps;
4601 return;
4602 }
4603
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004604 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004605 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004606 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4607
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004608 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4609 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004610 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004611 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004612 Kind = ArrayKind;
4613}
4614
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004615Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004616 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004617 case SingleValueKind:
4618 return SingleValue;
4619 case LinearMapKind: {
4620 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4621 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4622 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4623 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4624 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4625 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4626 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4627 return Result;
4628 }
4629 case BitMapKind: {
4630 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4631 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004632
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004633 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4634 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4635 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4636 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004637
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004638 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4639 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4640 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4641 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004642
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004643 // Shift down.
4644 Value *DownShifted =
4645 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4646 // Mask off.
4647 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4648 }
4649 case ArrayKind: {
4650 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4651 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4652 uint64_t TableSize =
4653 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4654 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4655 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4656 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4657 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004658
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004659 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4660 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4661 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4662 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4663 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004664 }
4665 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4666}
4667
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004668bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004669 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004670 Type *ElementType) {
4671 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004672 if (!IT)
4673 return false;
4674 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4675 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004676
4677 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004678 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004679 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004680 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004681}
4682
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004683/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4684/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004685static bool
4686ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4687 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4688 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004689 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4690 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004691
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004692 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004693 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004694 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4695 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004696
4697 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004698 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004699
4700 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004701 AllTablesFitInRegister =
4702 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
4703 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004704
4705 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4706 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4707 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4708 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004709 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004710 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004711
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004712 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4713 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4714 return true;
4715
4716 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4717 if (HasIllegalType)
4718 return false;
4719
4720 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4721 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4722 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4723 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004724}
4725
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004726/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4727/// \code
4728/// if (idx < tablesize)
4729/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4730/// else
4731/// r = default_value;
4732/// if (r != default_value)
4733/// ...
4734/// \endcode
4735/// Is optimized to:
4736/// \code
4737/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4738/// if (cond)
4739/// r = table[idx];
4740/// else
4741/// r = default_value;
4742/// if (cond)
4743/// ...
4744/// \endcode
4745/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004746static void reuseTableCompare(
4747 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
4748 Constant *DefaultValue,
4749 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004750
4751 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4752 if (!CmpInst)
4753 return;
4754
4755 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4756 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4757 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4758 return;
4759
4760 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4761 if (!CmpOp1)
4762 return;
4763
4764 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4765 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4766 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4767
4768 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4769 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4770 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4771 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4772 return;
4773
4774 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4775 // compare result.
4776 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4777 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004778 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004779 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4780 return;
4781 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4782 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4783 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004784
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004785 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4786 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4787 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4788 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4789 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4790 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4791 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4792 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4793 return;
4794 }
4795
4796 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4797 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4798 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4799 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4800 } else {
4801 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004802 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
4803 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4804 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004805 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4806 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4807 }
4808}
4809
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004810/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4811/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4812/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004813static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4814 const DataLayout &DL,
4815 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004816 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004817
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004818 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004819 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004820 return false;
4821
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004822 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4823 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4824
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004825 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4826 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4827 // string and lookup indices into that.
4828
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004829 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
4830 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004831 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4832 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004833 return false;
4834
4835 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004836 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004837 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4838 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4839 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4840 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4841
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004842 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004843 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
4844 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4845 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
4846 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
4847 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004848
4849 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4850 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4851 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4852 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4853 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4854 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4855
4856 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004857 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004858 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004859 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004860 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004861 return false;
4862
4863 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004864 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4865 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4866 Constant *Value = I.second;
4867 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4868 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4869 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004870 }
4871 }
4872
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004873 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004874 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004875 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4876 }
4877
4878 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4879 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4880 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4881 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4882
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004883 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4884 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004885 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004886 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004887 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004888
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004889 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4890 if (NeedMask) {
4891 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004892 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004893 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004894 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004895 return false;
4896 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004897
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004898 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4899 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4900 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004901 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004902 }
4903
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004904 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004905 return false;
4906
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004907 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004908 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004909 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
4910 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004911
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004912 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004913 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004914 Value *TableIndex =
4915 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004916
4917 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4918 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004919 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004920 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004921 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4922 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4923 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4924
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004925 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4926 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4927 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4928 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4929 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4930 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004931 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4932
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004933 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004934 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004935 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4936 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004937 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004938 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
4939 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
4940 RangeCheckBranch =
4941 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004942 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004943
4944 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4945 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004946
4947 if (NeedMask) {
4948 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4949 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4950 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4951 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4952 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004953 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
4954 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004955
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004956 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4957 // unnecessary illegal types.
4958 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4959 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4960 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004961 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004962 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4963 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004964 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
4965 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004966 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4967 }
4968 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4969
4970 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4971 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4972 // else continue with table lookup.
4973 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004974 Value *MaskIndex =
4975 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
4976 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
4977 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
4978 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004979 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4980
4981 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4982 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4983 }
4984
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004985 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4986 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4987 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4988 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4989 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4990 }
4991
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004992 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004993 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4994 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004995 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004996
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004997 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4998 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004999 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005000
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005001 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005002
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005003 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5004 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005005 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5006 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005007 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5008 ReturnedEarly = true;
5009 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005010 }
5011
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005012 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5013 // possible.
5014 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5015 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5016 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5017 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5018 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5019 }
5020 }
5021
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005022 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005023 }
5024
5025 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5026 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5027
5028 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005029 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005030 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005031
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005032 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005033 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005034 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5035 }
5036 SI->eraseFromParent();
5037
5038 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005039 if (NeedMask)
5040 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005041 return true;
5042}
5043
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005044bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005045 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5046
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005047 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5048 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5049 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5050 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5051 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005052 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005053
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005054 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5055 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5056 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005057 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005058
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005059 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5060 // away into any preds.
5061 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5062 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5063 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5064 ++BBI;
5065 if (SI == &*BBI)
5066 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005067 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005068 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005069
5070 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005071 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005072 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005073
5074 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005075 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5076 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005077
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005078 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
5079 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005080
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005081 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005082 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005083
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005084 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5085 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005086
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005087 return false;
5088}
5089
5090bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5091 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5092 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005093
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005094 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5095 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5096 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5097 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005098 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005099 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5100 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005101 --i;
5102 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005103 Changed = true;
5104 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005105 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005106
5107 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5108 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5109 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5110 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5111 return true;
5112 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005113
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005114 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5115 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5116 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5117 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5118 return true;
5119 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005120
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005121 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5122 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005123 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005124 }
5125 return Changed;
5126}
5127
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005128/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5129/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5130/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5131/// a shared handler.
5132///
5133/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5134/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5135/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5136/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5137/// sinking in this file)
5138///
5139/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5140/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5141/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5142/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5143/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5144/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5145///
5146/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5147/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5148/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5149static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5150 BasicBlock *BB) {
5151 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5152 assert(Succ);
5153 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5154 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5155 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5156 return false;
5157
5158 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5159 if (BB == OtherPred)
5160 continue;
5161 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5162 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5163 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5164 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005165 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5166 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005167 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5168 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5169 continue;
5170
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005171 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005172 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5173 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5174 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5175 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5176 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005177 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5178 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005179 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5180 }
5181
5182 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5183 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005184 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5185 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5186 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005187 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5188 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5189 }
5190
5191 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5192 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5193 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5194 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5195 }
5196
5197 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5198 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5199 BI->eraseFromParent();
5200 return true;
5201 }
5202 return false;
5203}
5204
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005205bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5206 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005207 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005208
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005209 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5210 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005211
5212 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5213 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005214 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5215 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5216 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5217 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005218 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005219 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005220 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005221 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5222 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005223
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005224 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5225 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5226 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5227 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5228 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5229 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005230 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005231 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5232 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005233 return true;
5234 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005235
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005236 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5237 // equivalent.
5238 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005239 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5240 }
5241 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005242 return true;
5243 }
5244
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005245 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5246 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5247 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5248 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005249 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5250 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005251 return false;
5252}
5253
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005254static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5255 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5256 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5257 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5258 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5259 return nullptr;
5260 PredPred = PPred;
5261 }
5262 return PredPred;
5263}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005264
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005265bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005266 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005267
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005268 // Conditional branch
5269 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5270 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5271 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5272 // switch.
5273 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005274 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005275 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005276
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005277 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5278 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5279 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5280 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5281 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5282 ++I;
5283 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005284 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005285 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005286 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005287 ++I;
5288 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5289 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5290 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005291 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005292 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005293 }
5294 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005295
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005296 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005297 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005298 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005299
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005300 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5301 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5302 // of the BI branch.
5303 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5304 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5305 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5306 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5307 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5308 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5309 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5310 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5311 if (Implication) {
5312 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5313 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5314 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5315 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5316 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5317 BI->setCondition(CI);
5318 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5319 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5320 }
5321 }
5322 }
5323
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005324 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5325 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5326 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005327 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5328 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005329
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005330 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5331 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5332 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5333 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005334 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5335 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005336 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5337 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005338 } else {
5339 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005340 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005341 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5342 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5343 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005344 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5345 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005346 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005347 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005348 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005349 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005350 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5351 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5352 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005353 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5354 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005355 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005356
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005357 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5358 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5359 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5360 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005361 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005362 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005363
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005364 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005365 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5366 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005367 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005368 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005369 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005370
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005371 // Look for diamond patterns.
5372 if (MergeCondStores)
5373 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5374 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5375 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5376 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5377 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005378
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005379 return false;
5380}
5381
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005382/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5383static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5384 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5385 if (!C)
5386 return false;
5387
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005388 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005389 return false;
5390
5391 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005392 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005393 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005394
5395 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5396 // control flow (eg. calls)
5397 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005398 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005399 return false;
5400
5401 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5402 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5403 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5404 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5405
5406 // Look through bitcasts.
5407 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5408 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5409
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005410 // Load from null is undefined.
5411 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005412 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5413 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005414
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005415 // Store to null is undefined.
5416 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005417 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005418 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5419 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005420 }
5421 return false;
5422}
5423
5424/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005425/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005426static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5427 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5428 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5429 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5430 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5431 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5432 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5433 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5434 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5435 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5436 // destination from conditional branches.
5437 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5438 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5439 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005440 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5441 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005442 BI->eraseFromParent();
5443 return true;
5444 }
5445 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5446 }
5447
5448 return false;
5449}
5450
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005451bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005452 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005453
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005454 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005455 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005456
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005457 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5458 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005459 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005460 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005461 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5462 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5463 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005464 }
5465
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005466 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5467 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005468 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005469
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005470 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5471 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5472
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005473 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5474 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5475
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005476 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5477 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5478 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5479 //
5480 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5481 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005482
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005483 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5484
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005485 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5486 // eliminate it, do so now.
5487 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5488 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005489 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005490
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005491 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005492 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005493 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005494 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5495 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005496 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005497 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5498 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005499 }
5500 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005501 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5502 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005503 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005504 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5505 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005506 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005507 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5508 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5509 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005510 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005511 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5512 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005513 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005514 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5515 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5516 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005517 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005518 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5519 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5520 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005521 }
5522
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005523 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005524}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005525
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005526/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5527/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005528/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5529/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5530///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005531bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005532 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5533 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005534 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005535 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5536 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005537}